<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ckong</id>
	<title>BCI2000 Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Ckong"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/Ckong"/>
	<updated>2026-06-30T03:04:05Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.6</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup&amp;diff=8461</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:EEG Measurement Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup&amp;diff=8461"/>
		<updated>2019-08-16T13:40:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Impedance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page describes the physical setup required for EEG measurements.&lt;br /&gt;
EEG utilizes metal electrodes attached to a human subject&#039;s scalp, measuring tiny electrical potentials which reflect the brain&#039;s electrical activity.&lt;br /&gt;
Although setting up amplifier and electrodes appears simple and straightforward, a successful, good quality EEG recording requires attention to not-so obvious details, and some practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Electrodes==&lt;br /&gt;
An EEG amplifier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Differential_amplifier measures voltage differences] between points on the scalp.&lt;br /&gt;
This implies that each channel is connected to two electrodes. Usually, measurement is &amp;quot;unipolar&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;bipolar&amp;quot;, which means that the second electrode is identical for all channels, and called &amp;quot;reference&amp;quot; (Ref).&lt;br /&gt;
Also, amplifier inputs must be kept within a small voltage range relative to the amplifier&#039;s zero (ground) voltage level. This is achieved by connecting yet another electrode, a &amp;quot;ground&amp;quot; (Gnd) electrode, to the subject&#039;s scalp. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EEG electrodes are small metal plates that are attached to the scalp using a conducting electrode gel.&lt;br /&gt;
They can be made from various materials.&lt;br /&gt;
Most frequently, tin (Sn) and silver/silver-chloride (Ag/AgCl) electrodes are used but there are gold (Au) and platinum (Pt) electrodes as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While Sn electrodes have the advantage of being cheap, they introduce a large amount of low-frequency noise (&amp;quot;drifting&amp;quot;) below 1Hz. For low-frequency recordings, such as Slow Cortical Potential measurements, or low-noise ERP recordings, Ag/AgCl electrodes are typically used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Important but often neglected:&#039;&#039; Using electrodes made from different materials in the same recording will result in DC voltage offsets between electrodes, due to electrochemical [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galvanic_series contact potentials].&lt;br /&gt;
Such contact potentials are generally larger than what a typical amplifier tolerates. The result will be a zero or much diminished signal amplitude, and a bad signal-to-noise ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
This applies to all amplifier inputs, i.e. channels, reference, and ground electrodes must all be made from the same material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The 10-20 International System==&lt;br /&gt;
The 10-20 international system is the standard naming and positioning&lt;br /&gt;
scheme for EEG applications. It is based on an iterative subdivision of arcs&lt;br /&gt;
on the scalp starting from craniometric reference points: Nasion&lt;br /&gt;
(Ns), Inion (In), Left (PAL) and Right (PAR) pre-auricular points. The&lt;br /&gt;
intersection of the longitudinal (Ns-In) and lateral (PAL-PAR) is named the&lt;br /&gt;
Vertex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ElectrodePositions1020.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original 10-20 system included only 19 electrodes (see panel B of the&lt;br /&gt;
figure). Later on, extensions were proposed so that now you can place over 70&lt;br /&gt;
electrodes in standard positions (see panel C of the figure). This extension also&lt;br /&gt;
renamed four electrodes (marked in black in the figure); the original names&lt;br /&gt;
were: T3, T5, T4, and T6 for T7, P7, T8, and P8, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, one of the electrodes mounted in these positions is used as&lt;br /&gt;
reference channel. More often, ear lobe or mastoid (i.e. bony outgrowth behind&lt;br /&gt;
the ear) are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Brain Areas and Landmarks==&lt;br /&gt;
Often, it is important to assess whether a given brain signal topology makes sense with regard to [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm#Geometry|a-priori knowledge about sources of interest]].&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases, there is a direct correspondence between major brain features, and electrode positions in &lt;br /&gt;
the 10-20 international system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the image displaying electrode positions above, two of these features are indicated by thin lines, and may be identified easily when using a properly placed EEG cap:&lt;br /&gt;
*The &#039;&#039;&#039;central sulcus (rolandic fissure)&#039;&#039;&#039; separates the frontal lobe from the parietal lobe. Its course corresponds to the thin lines touching CPz-C2-C4 and CPz-C1-C3, respectively. The two gyri immediately neighboring the central sulcus are the&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;primary motor cortex&#039;&#039;&#039; (in frontal direction), and&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;primary sensory cortex&#039;&#039;&#039; (in occipital direction).&lt;br /&gt;
*The course of the &#039;&#039;&#039;lateral sulcus&#039;&#039;&#039; corresponds to the lines C8-FT8-FT10 resp. C5-FT7-FT9. It separates the &#039;&#039;&#039;temporal lobe&#039;&#039;&#039; from the remaining parts of the brain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Electrode Placement==&lt;br /&gt;
Accurate placement of many electrodes on the scalp is time consuming and requires practice. EEG caps greatly facilitate this process.  These caps are made of elastic fabric (often available in different sizes), and electrodes are already fixed in the proper configuration. One proven technique to place electrodes using such caps is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mark the vertex on the subject&#039;s scalp using a felt-tip pen or some other similar method. Begin by locating the nasion and inion on the subject as indicated in panel A of the figure above. Using a tape measure, find the distance between these two locations. The point half-way between the two points is the vertex. Make a mark at that point for later reference. (Other 10-20 points could be located in a similar manner.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Mark scalp positions for Fpz and Oz. The Fpz position is above the nasion 10% of the distance from the nasion to the Inion. The Oz position is above the inion the same distance.&lt;br /&gt;
*Identify the &#039;&#039;&#039;Cz&#039;&#039;&#039; electrode on the EEG cap and place the cap to position the Cz electrode on the vertex.&lt;br /&gt;
*Keeping Cz fixed, slide the cap onto the head.&lt;br /&gt;
*While ensuring that &#039;&#039;&#039;Cz&#039;&#039;&#039; does not shift, adjust the cap such that the Fz-Cz-Pz line is on the midline; Fp1-Fp2 line is horizontal, and at the level of the Fpz mark; the O1-O2 line is horizontal, and at the level of the Oz mark.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can now fix Ref and Gnd electrodes. These electrodes are attached in one of a few typical configurations.  One common configuration is to attach the Ref electrode to one earlobe, and the Gnd electrode to the mastoid on the same side of the head. Another possible configuration is to attach Ref to one mastoid and Gnd to the other mastoid.  This choice is influenced by the used cap technology, which may have dedicated electrodes outside the cap for reference and ground, or may have these electrodes embedded in the cap directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Noise Reduction==&lt;br /&gt;
===Impedance===&lt;br /&gt;
Impedance between the scalp and electrodes, measured in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;kOhm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, is a main factor of the recording signal quality. While introducing low frequency noise, high impedance can also indicate a poor conductivity between electrodes and the underneath skin. Rubbing the skin using a wood stick can break the dry tissue on the surface of the skin and increase conductivity. For wet electrodes, sufficient gel can moist the skin throughout times, which lowers the impedance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To measure the current impedance,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;AcquisitionMode&#039;&#039; to impedance measurement.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;FilterEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;NotchEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To inspect current signal quality without filters,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Source Signal module, right click.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;High Pass&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0.1Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;Low Pass&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;off&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;Notch&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;off&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Impedance Measurement&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:MeasureElectrodeImpedanceFirst.PNG|Electrode impedance before rubbing the skin and applying more gel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:SourceSignalQualityFirst.PNG|Noisy Signal&lt;br /&gt;
Image:MeasureElectrodeImpedanceSecond.PNG|Electrode impedance after rubbing the skin and applying more gel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:SourceSignalQualitySecond.PNG|Good Signal&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To switch back to recording mode,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;AcquisitionMode&#039;&#039; to analog signal acquisition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;FilterEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;NotchEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To inspect current signal quality with filters,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Source Signal module, right click.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;Notch&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;60Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grounding===&lt;br /&gt;
Brain signal quality can also be interfered by surrounded electronics. Unshield power adapters of monitors or running cables in the nearby walls can induce noise to the raw signal. While filtering can take care of most noise, physically removing the source of noise can achieve higher signal quality. One good way is to ground the subject though the amplifier. The gUSBamp of our example has a grounding outlet on the back. Subject can also inspect the effect of grounding by touching the metal case of the amplifier. Both can achieve a cleaner signal at the source level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==EEG Artifacts==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mains Interference===&lt;br /&gt;
Electrical power lines use sinusoidal voltages with a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz, depending on your&lt;br /&gt;
[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_countries_with_mains_power_plugs%2C_voltages_and_frequencies#Table_of_mains_voltages_and_frequencies country].&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, 50Hz are used in Europe, Asia, Africa, and parts of South America; 60Hz are used in North America, and parts of South America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mains voltage is typically 110 or 230 Volts, and thus exceeds the EEG&#039;s 50 to 100 Microvolts by a factor of &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2*10^6&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, or 126 dB. Therefore, mains interference is ubiquitous in EEG recordings, especially if taken outside specially equipped, shielded rooms, and EEG amplifiers usually provide a so-called notch filter that suppresses signals in a narrow band around the mains frequency in question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amplifier notch filters are designed to suppress a certain amount of mains interference. When there is mains interference still visible in the signal after activating the amplifier&#039;s notch filter, this is often due to high electrode impedance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:MainsInterference.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Eye Blink Artifacts===&lt;br /&gt;
Eye blink artifacts are generated by fast movement of the eyelid along the cornea, as it happens during an eye blink.&lt;br /&gt;
By friction between lid and cornea, this movement results in charge separation, with a dominantly dipolar charge distribution, and the dipole moment pointing in up-down-direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the EEG, this is recorded as a positive peak lasting a few tenths of a second, mainly&lt;br /&gt;
visible in the frontopolar region, but propagating to all the electrodes of the montage, becoming weaker with distance from the front.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For blink artifacts, the power contained in their frequency components in the alpha band is negligible, so they produce no&lt;br /&gt;
apparent effect on SMR data analysis (as long as their number is reasonable).&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, their amplitude is quite large so that time domain analyses (such as&lt;br /&gt;
averaged P300 wave forms) can be strongly influenced by their presence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:BlinkArtifacts.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Eye Movement (EOG) Artifacts===&lt;br /&gt;
EOG artifacts are produced by eye movements, and generated by a frictive mechanism similar to the one underlying blink artifacts but involving retina and cornea rather than cornea alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect on frontopolar and frontotemporal electrodes can be symmetric or&lt;br /&gt;
antisymmetric, depending whether the movement is vertical or horizontal,&lt;br /&gt;
respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of eye movement artifacts on frequency- or time-domain analysis is quite similar to that of blink artifacts, except that their frequency content is even lower, and amplitudes tend to be larger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EOGArtifacts.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Muscular (EMG) Artifacts===&lt;br /&gt;
EMG activity must be carefully checked at the beginning of each recording, and&lt;br /&gt;
verified throughout the recording. Its effect can completely obscure any&lt;br /&gt;
frequency analysis. Most common sources of EMG are the muscles that lift&lt;br /&gt;
the eye brows, and those which close the jaw. Both groups are inadvertently&lt;br /&gt;
contracted as a consequence of a psychological effort. Keeping the mouth&lt;br /&gt;
slightly open (or the tip of the toungue between the foreteeth) is a good&lt;br /&gt;
strategy to avoid jaw-generated EMG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EMGArtifacts.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
*If you&#039;re following the [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], please proceed to [[User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session|Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session]].&lt;br /&gt;
*If you&#039;re following the [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 BCI Tutorial]], please proceed to [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8423</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8423"/>
		<updated>2019-07-29T14:56:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Subject-Specific Parameters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/examples/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ClassifierMatrix.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In our example, as &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot; is our best feature, we will enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session#Generating Spectra and Topography Plots|the previous page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter 1 as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8422</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8422"/>
		<updated>2019-07-29T14:56:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Configuring BCI2000 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/examples/SMR_screeing_left_vs_right.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:WindowSize.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet (details can be inspected under &#039;&#039;Stimuli&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;rarr; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved. In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (equally distributed left and right hand) is recommended as a initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stimuli.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying a command of left or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right command is displayed, engage movement of the respective hand. It is recommended that the movement be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
For future sessions with hands and feet involved,the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, engage simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, engage movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement. This is crucial as it takes time for mu rhythm to settle and ready for the next peak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run takes five minutes and gathers 25 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand and the right hand. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that four runs are suggested. This is done as four separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:InitialSession.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8421</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8421"/>
		<updated>2019-07-29T14:53:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/examples/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box to compare the spelling results to example letters.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/examples/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8420</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8420"/>
		<updated>2019-07-29T14:52:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box to compare the spelling results to example letters.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/examples/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Preparing_your_BCI2000_system_for_P300_BCI_experiments_for_the_first_time&amp;diff=8419</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Preparing your BCI2000 system for P300 BCI experiments for the first time</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Preparing_your_BCI2000_system_for_P300_BCI_experiments_for_the_first_time&amp;diff=8419"/>
		<updated>2019-07-29T14:51:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Configuring BCI2000 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Preparing for Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Display settings&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Display&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr; Settings &amp;amp;rarr; Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this example, we see that the amplifier is connected to &#039;&#039;COM8&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch\P3Speller_&amp;lt;your amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/examples/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SourceTabCircledMu.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels to the respective electrode positions&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Fz Cz P3 Pz P4 PO7 PO8 Oz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;320px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the system has been configured, the [[User Tutorial:EEG Measurement Setup|EEG Measurement Setup]] page shows you how to physically set up an EEG measurement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8384</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8384"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T19:20:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Multiple Sessions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CursorTask.PNG|right|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first feedback Session, the motion of the cursor might not follow the behavior of the subject. This is because the &#039;&#039;Adaptaion&#039;&#039; mode is on. In &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; box contains two numbers &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. As our example involves only one dimensional control, the horizontal component is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. By having &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on the vertial component, the linear classifier will &amp;quot;learn&amp;quot; the best coeficient to distinguish the difference of mu power between &amp;quot;right hand&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;. When the first session, or the &amp;quot;learning session&amp;quot; ended, one can set the vertical component to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and subject can then try to gain control on the cursor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion during the &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot; phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the initial run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:GainControl.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
As discussed above, you can now change the &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; vertical component from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
To control sensitivity of the cursor, you can increase the vertical component of the &#039;&#039;NormalizerGains&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039; to test out the gain value.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned in [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm#Behavioral Properties|introduction]], ERD and ERS&#039;s occurrence don&#039;t require a physical presence of movements. Using the same methodology, subject can try to the cursor with pure imaginations. Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8383</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8383"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T19:20:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CursorTask.PNG|right|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first feedback Session, the motion of the cursor might not follow the behavior of the subject. This is because the &#039;&#039;Adaptaion&#039;&#039; mode is on. In &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; box contains two numbers &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. As our example involves only one dimensional control, the horizontal component is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. By having &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on the vertial component, the linear classifier will &amp;quot;learn&amp;quot; the best coeficient to distinguish the difference of mu power between &amp;quot;right hand&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;. When the first session, or the &amp;quot;learning session&amp;quot; ended, one can set the vertical component to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and subject can then try to gain control on the cursor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion during the &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot; phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the initial run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:GainControl.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
As discussed above, you can now change the &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; vertical component from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
To control sensitivity of the cursor, you can increase the vertical component of the &#039;&#039;NormalizerGains&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039; to test out the gain value.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned in [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm#Behavioral Properties|introduction]], ERD and ERS&#039;s occurrence doesn&#039;t require a physical presence of movements. Using the same methodology, subject can try to the cursor with pure imaginations. Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8382</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8382"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T19:10:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Multiple Sessions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CursorTask.PNG|right|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first feedback Session, the motion of the cursor might not follow the behavior of the subject. This is because the &#039;&#039;Adaptaion&#039;&#039; mode is on. In &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; box contains two numbers &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. As our example involves only one dimensional control, the horizontal component is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. By having &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on the vertial component, the linear classifier will &amp;quot;learn&amp;quot; the best coeficient to distinguish the difference of mu power between &amp;quot;right hand&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;. When the first session, or the &amp;quot;learning session&amp;quot; ended, one can set the vertical component to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and subject can then try to gain control on the cursor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion during the &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot; phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the initial run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:GainControl.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
As discussed above, you can now change the &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; vertical component from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
To control sensitivity of the cursor, you can increase the vertical component of the &#039;&#039;NormalizerGains&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039; to test out the gain value.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:GainControl.PNG&amp;diff=8381</id>
		<title>File:GainControl.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:GainControl.PNG&amp;diff=8381"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T19:09:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8380</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8380"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T18:52:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Subject */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CursorTask.PNG|right|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first feedback Session, the motion of the cursor might not follow the behavior of the subject. This is because the &#039;&#039;Adaptaion&#039;&#039; mode is on. In &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; box contains two numbers &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. As our example involves only one dimensional control, the horizontal component is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. By having &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on the vertial component, the linear classifier will &amp;quot;learn&amp;quot; the best coeficient to distinguish the difference of mu power between &amp;quot;right hand&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;. When the first session, or the &amp;quot;learning session&amp;quot; ended, one can set the vertical component to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and subject can then try to gain control on the cursor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion during the &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot; phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8379</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8379"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T18:51:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Subject */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:CursorTask.PNG|right|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first feedback Session, the motion of the cursor might not follow the behavior of the subject. This is because the &#039;&#039;Adaptaion&#039;&#039; mode is on. In &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; box contains two numbers &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. As our example involves only one dimensional control, the horizontal component is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. By having &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on the vertial component, the linear classifier will &amp;quot;learn&amp;quot; the best coeficient to distinguish the difference of mu power between &amp;quot;right hand&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;. When the first session, or the &amp;quot;learning session&amp;quot; ended, one can set the vertical component to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and subject can then try to gain control on the cursor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion during the &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot; phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:CursorTask.PNG&amp;diff=8378</id>
		<title>File:CursorTask.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:CursorTask.PNG&amp;diff=8378"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T18:50:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8377</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8377"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T18:32:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the first feedback Session, the motion of the cursor might not follow the behavior of the subject. This is because the &#039;&#039;Adaptaion&#039;&#039; mode is on. In &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, &#039;&#039;Adaptation&#039;&#039; box contains two numbers &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. As our example involves only one dimensional control, the horizontal component is &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. By having &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; on the vertial component, the linear classifier will &amp;quot;learn&amp;quot; the best coeficient to distinguish the difference of mu power between &amp;quot;right hand&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot;. When the first session, or the &amp;quot;learning session&amp;quot; ended, one can set the vertical component to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and subject can then try to gain control on the cursor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion during the &amp;quot;rest&amp;quot; phase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8376</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_Mu_Rhythm_Feedback_Session&amp;diff=8376"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T16:51:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Subject */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|created a subject-specific configuration file]] for the on-line system as described in the previous step of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparation==&lt;br /&gt;
If you quit BCI2000 after the [[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|previous step,]] start it using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, or the link to that file which you created on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, load the configuration file that you saved in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] as you did for the [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject is ready for EEG acquisition, it is time to brief the subject about the experimental task. Suggested instructions to the experimenter and subject are listed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A screen with a black background is initially presented. As soon as the subject is&lt;br /&gt;
ready and the EEG traces are stabilized, the investigator will start the&lt;br /&gt;
acquisition. For each trial, four phases will occur:&lt;br /&gt;
#Target presentation. A target appears on the edge of the screen for about 10 second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Cursor movement. A cursor appears on the middle of the screen, and begins to move vertically towards the edge of the screen. Its position is controlled by the EEG features that were defined in the previous step. The subject&#039;s task is to engage in respective hand or feet movement based on the location of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
#Result. If the subject successfully hits the target, the target changes its color. Otherwise, no change occurs. In either case, this period lasts one second.&lt;br /&gt;
#Intertrial Interval. The screen will then turn black for one second.  This indicates the end of the trial. After this one-second period, the next trial starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a target is presented, the subject should engage the type of movement associated with the channel-frequency features [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|chosen for feedback]]. In our example, since the largest r-squared value was associated with &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot;, when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;bottom edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, move right hand; when the target is on the &#039;&#039;&#039;top edge&#039;&#039;&#039;, stay rest. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Explicitly specifying a type of imagination to control cursor movement will help the subject achieve initial cursor control. Once the subject has become more proficient with the task, motor imagery typically becomes less important. In this situation, it is not uncommon that subjects report that they just &amp;quot;imagine to move the cursor.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The second set of instructions to the subject regards the minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts, he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039; button to start the feedback experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
During the experiment, the subject&#039;s performance is written into a log window on the experimenter&#039;s screen, and recorded into a log file that is saved to disk in the session directory. The experimenter should minimize noise in the room and not disturb the subject.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Monitoring the Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
After recording has started, the experimenter may feel the temptation to leave&lt;br /&gt;
the subject alone during the run since most of the experimental activities are&lt;br /&gt;
automated in BCI2000. However, the experimenter has several important &lt;br /&gt;
tasks during the experiment:&lt;br /&gt;
*Filling in a run-sheet to report information that is not automatically recorded by BCI2000 and that will later help when data are analyzed (e.g., subject did not seem to understand the instructions in the first run, instructions to the subject for a particular run, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring the EEG signal to verify the quality of the recording (e.g., no electrode contact failure, muscular, ocular, or motion artifacts, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Reinforce the subject: notify the subject if he/she is producing artifacts, keep the subject alert if getting drowsy, give the subject feedback about his/her performance so that interest, alertness, and attention is kept high.&lt;br /&gt;
The run sheet is the most important means of communication between the&lt;br /&gt;
technician who performs the recordings and the person who analyzes the data&lt;br /&gt;
(or a comprehensive reminder if somebody does both). It is important that&lt;br /&gt;
it is compiled carefully and that it is rich in what may seem to be obvious detail: only&lt;br /&gt;
time will say what is standard and what changes from session to session, and if&lt;br /&gt;
you will need to analyze data acquired years before, you are likely to miss information&lt;br /&gt;
if you did not record all information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
After the session has finished, you may want to save auto-adjusted parameters for the next session.&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;Save Parameters&#039;&#039; from the configuration window to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, the &#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039; dialog allows you to choose a data file rather than a parameter file, and thus use the configuration contained in a previous session&#039;s data file for the next session. However, parameters contained in a data file reflect the state at the &#039;&#039;beginning&#039;&#039; of the recording, so changes during a session&#039;s last run cannot be recovered that way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. As a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files, and it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later separate data files into runs even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After each session, it is recommended that you analyze the recorded data in the same way as you did for the  [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|initial session]]. This allows you to track and adapt to signal changes in the subject&#039;s parameters that may occur in the course of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Remarks==&lt;br /&gt;
One critical element of such experiments is that they need to be consistent and rigorous. For example, a typical session will consist of a number (e.g., 4-8) of 3-min experimental runs. Unless there is an obvious technical problem (e.g., the cursor always immediately jumps to the bottom of the screen, which would point to a misconfiguration of BCI2000), do not change any of the parameters (such as locations, frequencies, etc.) across these runs. When doing offline analyses, always strive to collect at least four runs with the exact same configuration. Because there is so much variability in the subject&#039;s performance and in the EEG, it is likely that you will otherwise not be able to derive meaningful results or conclusions. You may find that, for example, for three consecutive sessions the subject&#039;s best frequency is 12 Hz and not 10 Hz as initially configured. In this case, you could make this small adaptation to the parameters, and have a reasonable chance that it will actually improve the subject&#039;s performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the Mu rhythm tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|mu rhythm feedback experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8375</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8375"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T16:36:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Classifier Matrix */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ClassifierMatrix.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In our example, as &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot; is our best feature, we will enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session#Generating Spectra and Topography Plots|the previous page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter 1 as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8374</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8374"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T16:35:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Classifier Matrix */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ClassifierMatrix.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In our example, as &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot; is our best feature, we will enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session#Generating Spectra and Topography Plots|the previous page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter 1 as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8373</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8373"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T16:35:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Classifier Matrix */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In our example, as &amp;quot;right hand vs. rest&amp;quot; is our best feature, we will enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session#Generating Spectra and Topography Plots|the previous page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter 1 as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ClassifierMatrix.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:ClassifierMatrix.PNG&amp;diff=8372</id>
		<title>File:ClassifierMatrix.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:ClassifierMatrix.PNG&amp;diff=8372"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T16:32:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8371</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8371"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T16:25:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Classifier Matrix */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; from [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session#Generating Spectra and Topography Plots|the previous page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter -1 (&#039;&#039;minus one&#039;&#039;) as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8370</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8370"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T15:58:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Spatial Filter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter -1 (&#039;&#039;minus one&#039;&#039;) as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8369</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8369"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T15:58:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Spatial Filter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter -1 (&#039;&#039;minus one&#039;&#039;) as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8368</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8368"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T15:58:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* The Spatial Filter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;200px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter -1 (&#039;&#039;minus one&#039;&#039;) as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SpatialFilter.PNG&amp;diff=8367</id>
		<title>File:SpatialFilter.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:SpatialFilter.PNG&amp;diff=8367"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T15:46:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: Ckong uploaded a new version of File:SpatialFilter.PNG&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Analyzing_the_Initial_Mu_Rhythm_Session&amp;diff=8366</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Analyzing_the_Initial_Mu_Rhythm_Session&amp;diff=8366"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T15:11:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Generating a Feature Plot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have [[User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session|performed an initial mu rhythm session]]. In order to identify the parameters (i.e., frequency and location) of a subject&#039;s mu rhythm, we will determine how different the EEG signal amplitude is for different types of imaginations that the subject performed during the recording. You will use the [[User Reference:BCI2000 Offline Analysis|BCI2000 Offline Analysis]] tool for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generating a Feature Plot==&lt;br /&gt;
The first step in these analyses is to separate data into amplitudes at individual &#039;&#039;&#039;frequencies&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;locations.&#039;&#039;&#039; These amplitudes are called &#039;&#039;features,&#039;&#039; and their correspondence with the subject&#039;s movements will be plotted as a so-called &#039;&#039;feature map.&#039;&#039; From a feature map, it is possible to determine those frequencies and locations whose amplitude is maximally correlated with the subject&#039;s task, i.e., those features that are most different between two conditions. These features will subsequently be used to provide feedback in a BCI experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:OfflineANA.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To generate a feature plot from the initial session&#039;s data, perform the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
*Start the [[User Reference:BCI2000 Offline Analysis|BCI2000 Offline Analysis]] tool:&lt;br /&gt;
**If you have a version of Matlab installed, run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;tools/OfflineAnalysis/OfflineAnalysis.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**Otherwise, follow the instructions provided [[User_Reference:BCI2000_Offline_Analysis#Systems_that_do_not_have_MATLAB_installed_or_with_versions_that_predate_MATLAB_v7.0|elsewhere]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Analysis Domain&#039;&#039;&#039; field, choose &#039;&#039;Frequency&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Acquisition Type&#039;&#039;&#039; field, choose &amp;quot;EEG&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*As a &#039;&#039;&#039;Spatial Filter&#039;&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;Common Average Reference (CAR)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;auto&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Trial Change Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
*Into the field labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 1&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the word &amp;quot;Rest&amp;quot; into the field labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 1&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Similarly, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 2&#039;&#039;&#039; field, and &amp;quot;Right Hand&amp;quot; into &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button located besides the &#039;&#039;&#039;Data Files&#039;&#039;&#039; field. A file chooser dialog will appear; navigate to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;data/mu/&amp;lt;Subject&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and select all &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;.dat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; files available there (use your keyboard&#039;s &#039;&#039;ctrl&#039;&#039; button to click-select multiple files), then click the dialog&#039;s &amp;quot;Open&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Generate Plots&amp;quot;, and wait for the feature plot to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the computation is complete, you will see a feature plot similar to the one below. In that plot, the horizontal axis corresponds to frequencies, and the vertical axis corresponds to individual channels. Color codes represent [[Glossary#r-squared|r-squared]] values, which are numbers between 0 and 1. R-squared values provide a measure for the amount to which a particular EEG feature (i.e., amplitude at a particular frequency and location) is influenced by the subject&#039;s task (e.g., hand vs. foot movements).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:eeg1FeaturePlt.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, there will be clusters of large r-squared values in the feature plot. The initial step to configure the online system is to determine which brain signal feature differed the most between two particular tasks.  This is accomplished by picking the largest r-squared value from the map and by noting its corresponding frequency and location.  However, it is important to verify whether the feature in question is consistent with the [[User_Tutorial:Introduction_to_the_Mu_Rhythm#Physical_Properties|mu rhythm&#039;s known properties]]. This verification is necessary to avoid misconfiguration due to [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG_Artifacts|EEG artifacts]], other noise, or random effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generating Spectra and Topography Plots==&lt;br /&gt;
*Pick the four largest r-squared values from the feature map between 9 and 36Hz, and read off their frequencies and channels. The plot&#039;s &amp;quot;Data Cursor&amp;quot; tool (&#039;&#039;Data Cursor&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039; menu) may be helpful for this.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the analysis program&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Spectra Channels&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter the channels you read off the feature map.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Topo Frequencies&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter the frequencies you read off the feature map.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Generate Plots&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:MuRhythmModulation.PNG|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The generated &#039;&#039;&#039;topography plots&#039;&#039;&#039; display the spatial distribution of r-squared values. In this comparison of EEG activity for right-hand movements and rest, there should be a clear maximum of r-squared values over the &#039;&#039;left&#039;&#039; motor cortex as shown in subfigure (A) and (B) above. &lt;br /&gt;
The generated &#039;&#039;&#039;spectra plots&#039;&#039;&#039; display amplitude distributions, and r-squared measure, over frequencies. Ideally, they should appear similar to the  (C) and (D) subfigures above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Analyzing Remaining Conditions==&lt;br /&gt;
Up to now, you performed an analysis of how brain activity is related to imagined movements of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Hand.&#039;&#039;&#039; In order to choose the most useful channel and frequency for online feedback, perform similar analyses for the remaining conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the analysis program&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 2&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &#039;&#039;Left Hand&#039;&#039; into &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the &#039;&#039;&#039;Overwrite existing plots&#039;&#039;&#039; check box is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;Generate Plots&#039;&#039; to create a feature plot for imagined movement of the left hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*As previously, pick the four largest r-squared values, and compute spectra and topographies for their channels and frequencies.&lt;br /&gt;
*Results should somewhat resemble that derived for the right hand, except that the colored activity changes should appear over the right and not the left motor cortex.&lt;br /&gt;
*Repeat the analysis for conditions &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;: &#039;&#039;Both Hands&#039;&#039;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 4&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;: &#039;&#039;Both Feet&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For the &#039;&#039;both hands&#039;&#039; condition, the result should resemble a combination of &#039;&#039;left hand&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;right hand&#039;&#039; results.&lt;br /&gt;
**For &#039;&#039;both feet,&#039;&#039; modulated activity should be centered around electrode Cz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Picking Optimal Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here we are looking for the frequency with the highest r-squared value between 9Hz and 36Hz. Further, acceptable readings are centered on the proper electrode for the predicted stimulus; C3 for readings from the right hand, C4 for the left hand, both C3 and C4 for both hands, and Cz for both feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equipped with the frequency and electrode that provides the reading with the highest r-squared value, we can begin configuring the setup for proper use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|Configuring Online Feedback]] shows you how to configure the BCI system using the parameters obtained in the analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:OfflineANA.PNG&amp;diff=8365</id>
		<title>File:OfflineANA.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:OfflineANA.PNG&amp;diff=8365"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T15:10:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: Ckong uploaded a new version of File:OfflineANA.PNG&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8364</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8364"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T14:54:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Subject-Specific Parameters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter -1 (&#039;&#039;minus one&#039;&#039;) as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8363</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Configuring_Online_Feedback&amp;diff=8363"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T14:51:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Subject-Specific Parameters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have performed and [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|analyzed an initial session]].&lt;br /&gt;
Now you are going to create a subject-specific parameter configuration for on-line feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting up BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
Start BCI2000 using the appropriate batch file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/CursorTask_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. You might consider creating a link to this file on the desktop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subject-Specific Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
Now, we will construct a full parameter file that is specific to that subject:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the configuration window, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot; to load  the parameter file [[User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session|saved previously]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Again, click &amp;quot;Load Parameters&amp;quot;, and load the parameter file at &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_basket_task.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; field to the subject&#039;s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Make sure the &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; field is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;002&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; is set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Spatial Filter==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SpatialFilter.PNG|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Spatial Filter computes a weighted combination of the incoming data from the electrodes based on their placement on the scalp of the subject. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because we are targeting specific areas of the brain to monitor, we use a spatial filter that allows the program to identify when the electrode of interest is activating specifically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is done by subtracting the average of the surrounding electrodes&#039; data from the electrode of interest. For example, as seen to the right the output channel &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; is the data from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; minus one-quarter each of &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;T7&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Such a filter is called a &amp;quot;Laplacian filter&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, go to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039;, and make sure that &amp;quot;full matrix&amp;quot; is selected in the &#039;&#039;SpatialFilterType&#039;&#039; field. Then, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; button next to &#039;&#039;SpatialFilter&#039;&#039; to open the matrix editor.&lt;br /&gt;
*For column headings, enter channel names in the same order as you did previously. Double-click a column heading to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter Laplacian filter coefficients as appropriate for your montage--you might need to reorder columns from the example above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The Classifier Matrix==&lt;br /&gt;
The Classifier Matrix applies weights to the incoming data that allows the program to accurately identify Mu Rhythm signals. This matrix is opened by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit Matrix&#039;&#039;&#039; next to the &#039;&#039;Classifier&#039;&#039; parameter in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
*Set &#039;&#039;Number of columns&#039;&#039; to 4, and &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 1. Click &#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039; to apply your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the first column (of the first row), labeled &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; if the right hand are being used, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the left hand, or &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Cz_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; for the feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**If both hands are being used, set &#039;&#039;Number of rows&#039;&#039; to 2, and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set new matrix size&#039;&#039;&#039;. Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C3_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; under &#039;&#039;input channel&#039;&#039; in the first row, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;C4_OUT&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; in the second.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the second column, labeled &#039;&#039;input element (bin)&#039;&#039;, enter feedback frequency in Hz, immediately followed with &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, as in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;12Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the third column, enter the value &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. This corresponds to the control channel for vertical control of the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the fourth column, enter -1 (&#039;&#039;minus one&#039;&#039;) as the weight. For further calibration, this weight can be increased to give stronger control or decreased to give finer control.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save your configuration in a parameter file wherever you find appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing Mu Rhythm Feedback Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Proper calibration of the Classifier and Spatial matrices are what takes the most time. A Mu Rhythm Feedback Session should be performed with the classifier matrix to gauge the efficacy of the settings. In the next step, you will learn how to actually [[User Tutorial:Performing a Mu Rhythm Feedback Session|perform a Mu rhythm feedback session]] using this configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Reference:LinearClassifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Analyzing_the_Initial_Mu_Rhythm_Session&amp;diff=8362</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Analyzing_the_Initial_Mu_Rhythm_Session&amp;diff=8362"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T14:34:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Generating a Feature Plot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have [[User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session|performed an initial mu rhythm session]]. In order to identify the parameters (i.e., frequency and location) of a subject&#039;s mu rhythm, we will determine how different the EEG signal amplitude is for different types of imaginations that the subject performed during the recording. You will use the [[User Reference:BCI2000 Offline Analysis|BCI2000 Offline Analysis]] tool for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generating a Feature Plot==&lt;br /&gt;
The first step in these analyses is to separate data into amplitudes at individual &#039;&#039;&#039;frequencies&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;locations.&#039;&#039;&#039; These amplitudes are called &#039;&#039;features,&#039;&#039; and their correspondence with the subject&#039;s movements will be plotted as a so-called &#039;&#039;feature map.&#039;&#039; From a feature map, it is possible to determine those frequencies and locations whose amplitude is maximally correlated with the subject&#039;s task, i.e., those features that are most different between two conditions. These features will subsequently be used to provide feedback in a BCI experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:OfflineANA.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To generate a feature plot from the initial session&#039;s data, perform the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
*Start the [[User Reference:BCI2000 Offline Analysis|BCI2000 Offline Analysis]] tool:&lt;br /&gt;
**If you have a version of Matlab installed, run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;tools/OfflineAnalysis/OfflineAnalysis.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**Otherwise, follow the instructions provided [[User_Reference:BCI2000_Offline_Analysis#Systems_that_do_not_have_MATLAB_installed_or_with_versions_that_predate_MATLAB_v7.0|elsewhere]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Analysis Domain&#039;&#039;&#039; field, choose &#039;&#039;Frequency&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Acquisition Type&#039;&#039;&#039; field, choose &amp;quot;EEG&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*As a &#039;&#039;&#039;Spatial Filter&#039;&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;Common Average Reference (CAR)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;auto&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Trial Change Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
*Into the field labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 1&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the word &amp;quot;Rest&amp;quot; into the field labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 1&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Similarly, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 2&#039;&#039;&#039; field, and &amp;quot;Right Hand&amp;quot; into &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button located besides the &#039;&#039;&#039;Data Files&#039;&#039;&#039; field. A file chooser dialog will appear; navigate to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;data/mu/&amp;lt;Subject&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and select all &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;.dat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; files available there (use your keyboard&#039;s &#039;&#039;ctrl&#039;&#039; button to click-select multiple files), then click the dialog&#039;s &amp;quot;Open&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Generate Plots&amp;quot;, and wait for the feature plot to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the computation is complete, you will see a feature plot similar to the one below. In that plot, the horizontal axis corresponds to frequencies, and the vertical axis corresponds to individual channels. Color codes represent [[Glossary#r-squared|r-squared]] values, which are numbers between 0 and 1. R-squared values provide a measure for the amount to which a particular EEG feature (i.e., amplitude at a particular frequency and location) is influenced by the subject&#039;s task (e.g., hand vs. foot movements).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:eeg1FeaturePlt.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, there will be clusters of large r-squared values in the feature plot. The initial step to configure the online system is to determine which brain signal feature differed the most between two particular tasks.  This is accomplished by picking the largest r-squared value from the map and by noting its corresponding frequency and location.  However, it is important to verify whether the feature in question is consistent with the [[User_Tutorial:Introduction_to_the_Mu_Rhythm#Physical_Properties|mu rhythm&#039;s known properties]]. This verification is necessary to avoid misconfiguration due to [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG_Artifacts|EEG artifacts]], other noise, or random effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generating Spectra and Topography Plots==&lt;br /&gt;
*Pick the four largest r-squared values from the feature map between 9 and 36Hz, and read off their frequencies and channels. The plot&#039;s &amp;quot;Data Cursor&amp;quot; tool (&#039;&#039;Data Cursor&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039; menu) may be helpful for this.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the analysis program&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Spectra Channels&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter the channels you read off the feature map.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Topo Frequencies&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter the frequencies you read off the feature map.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Generate Plots&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:MuRhythmModulation.PNG|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The generated &#039;&#039;&#039;topography plots&#039;&#039;&#039; display the spatial distribution of r-squared values. In this comparison of EEG activity for right-hand movements and rest, there should be a clear maximum of r-squared values over the &#039;&#039;left&#039;&#039; motor cortex as shown in subfigure (A) and (B) above. &lt;br /&gt;
The generated &#039;&#039;&#039;spectra plots&#039;&#039;&#039; display amplitude distributions, and r-squared measure, over frequencies. Ideally, they should appear similar to the  (C) and (D) subfigures above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Analyzing Remaining Conditions==&lt;br /&gt;
Up to now, you performed an analysis of how brain activity is related to imagined movements of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Hand.&#039;&#039;&#039; In order to choose the most useful channel and frequency for online feedback, perform similar analyses for the remaining conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the analysis program&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 2&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &#039;&#039;Left Hand&#039;&#039; into &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the &#039;&#039;&#039;Overwrite existing plots&#039;&#039;&#039; check box is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;Generate Plots&#039;&#039; to create a feature plot for imagined movement of the left hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*As previously, pick the four largest r-squared values, and compute spectra and topographies for their channels and frequencies.&lt;br /&gt;
*Results should somewhat resemble that derived for the right hand, except that the colored activity changes should appear over the right and not the left motor cortex.&lt;br /&gt;
*Repeat the analysis for conditions &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;: &#039;&#039;Both Hands&#039;&#039;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 4&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;: &#039;&#039;Both Feet&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For the &#039;&#039;both hands&#039;&#039; condition, the result should resemble a combination of &#039;&#039;left hand&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;right hand&#039;&#039; results.&lt;br /&gt;
**For &#039;&#039;both feet,&#039;&#039; modulated activity should be centered around electrode Cz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Picking Optimal Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here we are looking for the frequency with the highest r-squared value between 9Hz and 36Hz. Further, acceptable readings are centered on the proper electrode for the predicted stimulus; C3 for readings from the right hand, C4 for the left hand, both C3 and C4 for both hands, and Cz for both feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equipped with the frequency and electrode that provides the reading with the highest r-squared value, we can begin configuring the setup for proper use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|Configuring Online Feedback]] shows you how to configure the BCI system using the parameters obtained in the analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Analyzing_the_Initial_Mu_Rhythm_Session&amp;diff=8361</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Analyzing_the_Initial_Mu_Rhythm_Session&amp;diff=8361"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T14:15:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Generating a Feature Plot */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This tutorial step assumes that you have [[User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session|performed an initial mu rhythm session]]. In order to identify the parameters (i.e., frequency and location) of a subject&#039;s mu rhythm, we will determine how different the EEG signal amplitude is for different types of imaginations that the subject performed during the recording. You will use the [[User Reference:BCI2000 Offline Analysis|BCI2000 Offline Analysis]] tool for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generating a Feature Plot==&lt;br /&gt;
The first step in these analyses is to separate data into amplitudes at individual &#039;&#039;&#039;frequencies&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;locations.&#039;&#039;&#039; These amplitudes are called &#039;&#039;features,&#039;&#039; and their correspondence with the subject&#039;s movements will be plotted as a so-called &#039;&#039;feature map.&#039;&#039; From a feature map, it is possible to determine those frequencies and locations whose amplitude is maximally correlated with the subject&#039;s task, i.e., those features that are most different between two conditions. These features will subsequently be used to provide feedback in a BCI experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:OfflineANA.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To generate a feature plot from the initial session&#039;s data, perform the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
*Start the [[User Reference:BCI2000 Offline Analysis|BCI2000 Offline Analysis]] tool:&lt;br /&gt;
**If you have a version of Matlab installed, run &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;tools/OfflineAnalysis/OfflineAnalysis.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**Otherwise, follow the instructions provided [[User_Reference:BCI2000_Offline_Analysis#Systems_that_do_not_have_MATLAB_installed_or_with_versions_that_predate_MATLAB_v7.0|elsewhere]].&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Analysis Domain&#039;&#039;&#039; field, choose &#039;&#039;Frequency&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Acquisition Type&#039;&#039;&#039; field, choose &amp;quot;EEG&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*As a &#039;&#039;&#039;Spatial Filter&#039;&#039;&#039;, choose &amp;quot;Common Average Reference (CAR)&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;auto&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Trial Change Condition&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
*Into the field labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 1&#039;&#039;&#039;, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the word &amp;quot;Rest&amp;quot; into the field labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 1&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Similarly, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 2&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; into the &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 2&#039;&#039;&#039; field, and &amp;quot;Right Hand&amp;quot; into &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button located besides the &#039;&#039;&#039;Data Files&#039;&#039;&#039; field. A file chooser dialog will appear; navigate to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;data/mu/&amp;lt;Subject&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and select all &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;.dat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; files available there (use your keyboard&#039;s &#039;&#039;ctrl&#039;&#039; button to click-select multiple files), then click the dialog&#039;s &amp;quot;Open&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Generate Plots&amp;quot;, and wait for the feature plot to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the computation is complete, you will see a feature plot similar to the one below. In that plot, the horizontal axis corresponds to frequencies, and the vertical axis corresponds to individual channels. Color codes represent [[Glossary#r-squared|r-squared]] values, which are numbers between 0 and 1. R-squared values provide a measure for the amount to which a particular EEG feature (i.e., amplitude at a particular frequency and location) is influenced by the subject&#039;s task (e.g., hand vs. foot imagery).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:eeg1FeaturePlt.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, there will be clusters of large r-squared values in the feature plot. The initial step to configure the online system is to determine which brain signal feature differed the most between two particular tasks.  This is accomplished by picking the largest r-squared value from the map and by noting its corresponding frequency and location.  However, it is important to verify whether the feature in question is consistent with the [[User_Tutorial:Introduction_to_the_Mu_Rhythm#Physical_Properties|mu rhythm&#039;s known properties]]. This verification is necessary to avoid misconfiguration due to [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG_Artifacts|EEG artifacts]], other noise, or random effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Generating Spectra and Topography Plots==&lt;br /&gt;
*Pick the four largest r-squared values from the feature map between 9 and 36Hz, and read off their frequencies and channels. The plot&#039;s &amp;quot;Data Cursor&amp;quot; tool (&#039;&#039;Data Cursor&#039;&#039; from the &#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039; menu) may be helpful for this.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the analysis program&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Spectra Channels&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter the channels you read off the feature map.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Topo Frequencies&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter the frequencies you read off the feature map.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Generate Plots&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:MuRhythmModulation.PNG|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The generated &#039;&#039;&#039;topography plots&#039;&#039;&#039; display the spatial distribution of r-squared values. In this comparison of EEG activity for right-hand movements and rest, there should be a clear maximum of r-squared values over the &#039;&#039;left&#039;&#039; motor cortex as shown in subfigure (A) and (B) above. &lt;br /&gt;
The generated &#039;&#039;&#039;spectra plots&#039;&#039;&#039; display amplitude distributions, and r-squared measure, over frequencies. Ideally, they should appear similar to the  (C) and (D) subfigures above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Analyzing Remaining Conditions==&lt;br /&gt;
Up to now, you performed an analysis of how brain activity is related to imagined movements of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Right Hand.&#039;&#039;&#039; In order to choose the most useful channel and frequency for online feedback, perform similar analyses for the remaining conditions:&lt;br /&gt;
*In the analysis program&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition 2&#039;&#039;&#039; field, enter &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, and &#039;&#039;Left Hand&#039;&#039; into &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Condition Label 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure the &#039;&#039;&#039;Overwrite existing plots&#039;&#039;&#039; check box is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;Generate Plots&#039;&#039; to create a feature plot for imagined movement of the left hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*As previously, pick the four largest r-squared values, and compute spectra and topographies for their channels and frequencies.&lt;br /&gt;
*Results should somewhat resemble that derived for the right hand, except that the colored activity changes should appear over the right and not the left motor cortex.&lt;br /&gt;
*Repeat the analysis for conditions &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 3&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;: &#039;&#039;Both Hands&#039;&#039;, and &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;states.StimulusCode == 4&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;: &#039;&#039;Both Feet&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For the &#039;&#039;both hands&#039;&#039; condition, the result should resemble a combination of &#039;&#039;left hand&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;right hand&#039;&#039; results.&lt;br /&gt;
**For &#039;&#039;both feet,&#039;&#039; modulated activity should be centered around electrode Cz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Picking Optimal Features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here we are looking for the frequency with the highest r-squared value between 9Hz and 36Hz. Further, acceptable readings are centered on the proper electrode for the predicted stimulus; C3 for readings from the right hand, C4 for the left hand, both C3 and C4 for both hands, and Cz for both feet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Equipped with the frequency and electrode that provides the reading with the highest r-squared value, we can begin configuring the setup for proper use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Configuring Online Feedback|Configuring Online Feedback]] shows you how to configure the BCI system using the parameters obtained in the analysis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:OfflineANA.PNG&amp;diff=8360</id>
		<title>File:OfflineANA.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:OfflineANA.PNG&amp;diff=8360"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T14:11:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8359</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8359"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T13:50:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Performing the Initial Session */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_screeing_left_vs_right.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:WindowSize.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet (details can be inspected under &#039;&#039;Stimuli&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;rarr; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved. In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (equally distributed left and right hand) is recommended as a initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stimuli.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying a command of left or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right command is displayed, engage movement of the respective hand. It is recommended that the movement be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
For future sessions with hands and feet involved,the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, engage simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, engage movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement. This is crucial as it takes time for mu rhythm to settle and ready for the next peak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run takes five minutes and gathers 25 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand and the right hand. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that four runs are suggested. This is done as four separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:InitialSession.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:InitialSession.PNG&amp;diff=8358</id>
		<title>File:InitialSession.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:InitialSession.PNG&amp;diff=8358"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T13:48:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8357</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8357"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T20:02:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Performing the Initial Session */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_screeing_left_vs_right.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:WindowSize.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet (details can be inspected under &#039;&#039;Stimuli&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;rarr; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved. In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (equally distributed left and right hand) is recommended as a initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stimuli.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying a command of left or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right command is displayed, engage movement of the respective hand. It is recommended that the movement be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
For future sessions with hands and feet involved,the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, engage simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, engage movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement. This is crucial as it takes time for mu rhythm to settle and ready for the next peak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run takes five minutes and gathers 25 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand and the right hand. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that four runs are suggested. This is done as four separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8356</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8356"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:56:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Subject */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_screeing_left_vs_right.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:WindowSize.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet (details can be inspected under &#039;&#039;Stimuli&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;rarr; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved. In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (equally distributed left and right hand) is recommended as a initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stimuli.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying a command of left or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right command is displayed, engage movement of the respective hand. It is recommended that the movement be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
For future sessions with hands and feet involved,the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, engage simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, engage movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement. This is crucial as it takes time for mu rhythm to settle and ready for the next peak.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run gathers 20 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand, the right hand, both hands, and both feet. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that five runs are suggested. This is done as five separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8355</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8355"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:39:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Configuring BCI2000 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_screeing_left_vs_right.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:WindowSize.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet (details can be inspected under &#039;&#039;Stimuli&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;rarr; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved. In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (equally distributed left and right hand) is recommended as a initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stimuli.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;400px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right arrow is displayed, imagine movement of the respective hand. The imagined movement should be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, imagine simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, imagine movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., imagine opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement imagery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run gathers 20 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand, the right hand, both hands, and both feet. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that five runs are suggested. This is done as five separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8354</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8354"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:38:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Configuring BCI2000 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/SMR_screeing_left_vs_right.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:WindowSize.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1600&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;900&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1920&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 1920 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet (details can be inspected under &#039;&#039;Stimuli&#039;&#039; &amp;amp;rarr; &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;). &lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved. In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 0 0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; (equally distributed left and right hand) is recommended as a initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Stimuli.PNG|right|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right arrow is displayed, imagine movement of the respective hand. The imagined movement should be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, imagine simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, imagine movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., imagine opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement imagery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run gathers 20 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand, the right hand, both hands, and both feet. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that five runs are suggested. This is done as five separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:WindowSize.PNG&amp;diff=8353</id>
		<title>File:WindowSize.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:WindowSize.PNG&amp;diff=8353"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:36:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:Stimuli.PNG&amp;diff=8352</id>
		<title>File:Stimuli.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:Stimuli.PNG&amp;diff=8352"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:30:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8351</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8351"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:04:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Experimental Design */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand movement and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/InitialMuSession.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SourceTabCircledMu.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1024&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;768&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2048&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 2048 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 1 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right arrow is displayed, imagine movement of the respective hand. The imagined movement should be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, imagine simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, imagine movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., imagine opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement imagery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run gathers 20 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand, the right hand, both hands, and both feet. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that five runs are suggested. This is done as five separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8350</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8350"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T19:03:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Experimental Design */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to incorporate hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand imagery and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies. For the purpose of conceptual demonstration, the tutorial will mainly focus on one dimension control (up and down of a cursor) using hand movements. Once familiarized, one can then engage foot movements for more tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/InitialMuSession.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SourceTabCircledMu.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1024&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;768&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2048&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 2048 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 1 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right arrow is displayed, imagine movement of the respective hand. The imagined movement should be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, imagine simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, imagine movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., imagine opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement imagery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run gathers 20 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand, the right hand, both hands, and both feet. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that five runs are suggested. This is done as five separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8349</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Obtaining_Mu_Rhythm_Parameters_in_an_Initial_Session&amp;diff=8349"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T18:27:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Experimental Design */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Although the [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm|basic properties of the Mu rhythm]] are identical for all humans, spatial patterns and exact frequencies are different across people. Thus, it is necessary to obtain these individual parameters prior to any feedback experiments, i.e., to calibrate the BCI system using data acquired from an initial session.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Experimental Design==&lt;br /&gt;
In this initial session, the subject is instructed to imagine hand and/or foot movements in response to visual cues.&lt;br /&gt;
To identify a subject&#039;s Mu Rhythm, offline analyses then determine the frequency and location whose activity changes the most across conditions (e.g., hand imagery and rest). These analyses result in spectra calculated at different locations or in topographical plots at particular frequencies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preparing for the Initial (Screening) Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To begin, you first need to gather some system data. This tutorial will assume that you will be using a dual-monitor setup as shown below, with the experimenter of the sessions operating on monitor 1, and the subject will be watching monitor 2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open Display Properties by right-clicking on an empty portion of the desktop and clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039;, and navigating to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupOrientation.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|Make sure that Monitor 2, (which displays the instructions to the subject), is on the right of Monitor 1, (the experimenter&#039;s screen), and is aligned along the top.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:MonitorSetupPrimaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:MonitorSetupSecondaryRes.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|What we need to make a note of is the &#039;&#039;&#039;width&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 1, and the &#039;&#039;&#039;width and height&#039;&#039;&#039; of monitor 2.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In this example we see that Monitor 1 is 1920 pixels wide, and monitor 2 is 1600 pixels wide by 900 pixels tall.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Connect your amplifier to the computer, and turn it on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gUSBamp family, drivers can be downloaded from official website of gtec. In this example we are using a gUSBamp-8 amplifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your amplifier is from the gMOBIlab family, you will need to make a note of the port it is connected to. In order to determine that port, in Windows XP, go to the Windows Start Menu, and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Start &amp;amp;rarr;  Control Panel &amp;amp;rarr; System &amp;amp;rarr; Hardware &amp;amp;rarr; Device Manager &amp;amp;rarr; Ports (COM &amp;amp; LPT)&#039;&#039;&#039;. Different versions of Windows may have the Device Manager in a different location. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Finding the COM port&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:ControlPanel-Circled.PNG|Accessing the Control Panel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:System.PNG|Opening the System Properties&lt;br /&gt;
Image:DeviceManager.PNG|Opening the Device Manager&lt;br /&gt;
Image:COMCircled.PNG|Identifying the COM Port&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can now close all open windows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Configuring BCI2000==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you are using a source module that is not part of the BCI2000 core distribution, you will need to create a batch file and parameter file for your amplifier first. Please follow the steps described [[Contributions:How_to_use_a_Contributed_Source_Module#Creating_batch_files|on this page]].&lt;br /&gt;
*Start BCI2000 by double-clicking &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/StimulusPresentation_&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**For repeated use, placing a link to this file on the desktop might be a good idea.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/mu_tutorial/InitialMuSession.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectName&#039;&#039; to the subject’s initials.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectSession&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;001&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;SubjectRun&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;01&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SourceTabCircledMu.PNG|right|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; to the electrode positions according to the 10-20 convention.&lt;br /&gt;
**This names the channels according to their respective electrode positions.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;F3 F4 T7 C3 Cz C4 T8 Pz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; has been entered.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TransmitChList&#039;&#039; to the channel names entered into the &#039;&#039;ChannelNames&#039;&#039; parameter&lt;br /&gt;
*If using a gMOBIlab amplifier, set &#039;&#039;COM port&#039;&#039; to the port name that you found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|height=&amp;quot;180px&amp;quot;|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, set:&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; to the width of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; to the height of the display monitor, found earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, &#039;&#039;WindowWidth&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1024&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; and &#039;&#039;WindowHeight&#039;&#039; would be set to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;768&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;WindowLeft&#039;&#039; to the width of the experimenter’s monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
**In our example, this would be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2048&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**This shifts the character display to the right 2048 pixels, making it display on the secondary monitor.&lt;br /&gt;
*Take note of the &#039;&#039;Sequence&#039;&#039; field:&lt;br /&gt;
**This field contains four single-digit numbers separated by one space. Initially it will be &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1 1 1 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
**These numbers are frequencies of calling for the different subject activity. The first number corresponds to the left hand, the second is the right hand, the third for both hands, the fourth for both feet.&lt;br /&gt;
**Therefore, setting this field to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;2 1 0 1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; will call for the subject to move the left hand twice as often as the right or both feet, and will never call for both hands to be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
*Finally, save the parameter file where you deem appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Instruct the subject as described in the section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
During the initial session, the subject&#039;s screen will either be blank, or displaying an arrow pointing up, down, left, or right.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a left or right arrow is displayed, imagine movement of the respective hand. The imagined movement should be continuous opening and closing of the hand (e.g., squeezing a tennis ball) at a rate of about one opening/closing per second.&lt;br /&gt;
*When an up arrow is displayed, imagine simultaneous movement of both hands. This should be the same kind of movement as described for a single hand.&lt;br /&gt;
*When a down arrow is displayed, imagine movements of both feet. The movement should be similar to the one described for hands, i.e., imagine opening and closing your feet as if you could use them to grip an object.&lt;br /&gt;
*When you see a blank screen, please relax and stop any movement imagery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Performing the Initial Session==&lt;br /&gt;
To start an experimental run, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Run&#039;&#039;&#039; in the operator window. Each run gathers 20 data points, or &amp;quot;trials&amp;quot;, that differentiate between moving the left hand, the right hand, both hands, and both feet. Ideally, there should be 100 trials, meaning that five runs are suggested. This is done as five separate runs instead of one to allow the subject a chance between each run to rest, blink, swallow, speak, or have some water if so desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
Once all data have been collected, the [[User Tutorial:Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session|Analyzing the Initial Mu Rhythm Session]] page shows you how to analyze data from the initial session in order to determine parameters for online feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup&amp;diff=8348</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:EEG Measurement Setup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup&amp;diff=8348"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T17:37:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Noise Reduction */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This page describes the physical setup required for EEG measurements.&lt;br /&gt;
EEG utilizes metal electrodes attached to a human subject&#039;s scalp, measuring tiny electrical potentials which reflect the brain&#039;s electrical activity.&lt;br /&gt;
Although setting up amplifier and electrodes appears simple and straightforward, a successful, good quality EEG recording requires attention to not-so obvious details, and some practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Electrodes==&lt;br /&gt;
An EEG amplifier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Differential_amplifier measures voltage differences] between points on the scalp.&lt;br /&gt;
This implies that each channel is connected to two electrodes. Usually, measurement is &amp;quot;unipolar&amp;quot; rather than &amp;quot;bipolar&amp;quot;, which means that the second electrode is identical for all channels, and called &amp;quot;reference&amp;quot; (Ref).&lt;br /&gt;
Also, amplifier inputs must be kept within a small voltage range relative to the amplifier&#039;s zero (ground) voltage level. This is achieved by connecting yet another electrode, a &amp;quot;ground&amp;quot; (Gnd) electrode, to the subject&#039;s scalp. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EEG electrodes are small metal plates that are attached to the scalp using a conducting electrode gel.&lt;br /&gt;
They can be made from various materials.&lt;br /&gt;
Most frequently, tin (Sn) and silver/silver-chloride (Ag/AgCl) electrodes are used but there are gold (Au) and platinum (Pt) electrodes as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While Sn electrodes have the advantage of being cheap, they introduce a large amount of low-frequency noise (&amp;quot;drifting&amp;quot;) below 1Hz. For low-frequency recordings, such as Slow Cortical Potential measurements, or low-noise ERP recordings, Ag/AgCl electrodes are typically used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Important but often neglected:&#039;&#039; Using electrodes made from different materials in the same recording will result in DC voltage offsets between electrodes, due to electrochemical [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Galvanic_series contact potentials].&lt;br /&gt;
Such contact potentials are generally larger than what a typical amplifier tolerates. The result will be a zero or much diminished signal amplitude, and a bad signal-to-noise ratio.&lt;br /&gt;
This applies to all amplifier inputs, i.e. channels, reference, and ground electrodes must all be made from the same material.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The 10-20 International System==&lt;br /&gt;
The 10-20 international system is the standard naming and positioning&lt;br /&gt;
scheme for EEG applications. It is based on an iterative subdivision of arcs&lt;br /&gt;
on the scalp starting from craniometric reference points: Nasion&lt;br /&gt;
(Ns), Inion (In), Left (PAL) and Right (PAR) pre-auricular points. The&lt;br /&gt;
intersection of the longitudinal (Ns-In) and lateral (PAL-PAR) is named the&lt;br /&gt;
Vertex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ElectrodePositions1020.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original 10-20 system included only 19 electrodes (see panel B of the&lt;br /&gt;
figure). Later on, extensions were proposed so that now you can place over 70&lt;br /&gt;
electrodes in standard positions (see panel C of the figure). This extension also&lt;br /&gt;
renamed four electrodes (marked in black in the figure); the original names&lt;br /&gt;
were: T3, T5, T4, and T6 for T7, P7, T8, and P8, respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, one of the electrodes mounted in these positions is used as&lt;br /&gt;
reference channel. More often, ear lobe or mastoid (i.e. bony outgrowth behind&lt;br /&gt;
the ear) are used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Important Brain Areas and Landmarks==&lt;br /&gt;
Often, it is important to assess whether a given brain signal topology makes sense with regard to [[User Tutorial:Introduction to the Mu Rhythm#Geometry|a-priori knowledge about sources of interest]].&lt;br /&gt;
In most cases, there is a direct correspondence between major brain features, and electrode positions in &lt;br /&gt;
the 10-20 international system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the image displaying electrode positions above, two of these features are indicated by thin lines, and may be identified easily when using a properly placed EEG cap:&lt;br /&gt;
*The &#039;&#039;&#039;central sulcus (rolandic fissure)&#039;&#039;&#039; separates the frontal lobe from the parietal lobe. Its course corresponds to the thin lines touching CPz-C2-C4 and CPz-C1-C3, respectively. The two gyri immediately neighboring the central sulcus are the&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;primary motor cortex&#039;&#039;&#039; (in frontal direction), and&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&#039;primary sensory cortex&#039;&#039;&#039; (in occipital direction).&lt;br /&gt;
*The course of the &#039;&#039;&#039;lateral sulcus&#039;&#039;&#039; corresponds to the lines C8-FT8-FT10 resp. C5-FT7-FT9. It separates the &#039;&#039;&#039;temporal lobe&#039;&#039;&#039; from the remaining parts of the brain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Electrode Placement==&lt;br /&gt;
Accurate placement of many electrodes on the scalp is time consuming and requires practice. EEG caps greatly facilitate this process.  These caps are made of elastic fabric (often available in different sizes), and electrodes are already fixed in the proper configuration. One proven technique to place electrodes using such caps is the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mark the vertex on the subject&#039;s scalp using a felt-tip pen or some other similar method. Begin by locating the nasion and inion on the subject as indicated in panel A of the figure above. Using a tape measure, find the distance between these two locations. The point half-way between the two points is the vertex. Make a mark at that point for later reference. (Other 10-20 points could be located in a similar manner.) &lt;br /&gt;
*Mark scalp positions for Fpz and Oz. The Fpz position is above the nasion 10% of the distance from the nasion to the Inion. The Oz position is above the inion the same distance.&lt;br /&gt;
*Identify the &#039;&#039;&#039;Cz&#039;&#039;&#039; electrode on the EEG cap and place the cap to position the Cz electrode on the vertex.&lt;br /&gt;
*Keeping Cz fixed, slide the cap onto the head.&lt;br /&gt;
*While ensuring that &#039;&#039;&#039;Cz&#039;&#039;&#039; does not shift, adjust the cap such that the Fz-Cz-Pz line is on the midline; Fp1-Fp2 line is horizontal, and at the level of the Fpz mark; the O1-O2 line is horizontal, and at the level of the Oz mark.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can now fix Ref and Gnd electrodes. These electrodes are attached in one of a few typical configurations.  One common configuration is to attach the Ref electrode to one earlobe, and the Gnd electrode to the mastoid on the same side of the head. Another possible configuration is to attach Ref to one mastoid and Gnd to the other mastoid.  This choice is influenced by the used cap technology, which may have dedicated electrodes outside the cap for reference and ground, or may have these electrodes embedded in the cap directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Noise Reduction==&lt;br /&gt;
===Impedance===&lt;br /&gt;
Impedance between the scalp and electrodes, measured in &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;kOhm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, is a main factor of the recording signal quality. While introducing low frequency noise, high impedance can also indicate a poor conductivity between electrodes and the underneath skin. Rubbing the skin using a wood stick can break the dead tissue on the surface of the skin. For wet electrodes, sufficient gel can moist the skin throughout times, which lowers the impedance. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To measure the current impedance,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;AcquisitionMode&#039;&#039; to impedance measurement.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;FilterEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;NotchEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To inspect current signal quality without filters,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Source Signal module, right click.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;High Pass&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;0.1Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;Low Pass&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;off&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;Notch&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;off&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Impedance Measurement&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;600px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;4&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:MeasureElectrodeImpedanceFirst.PNG|Electrode impedance before rubbing the skin and applying more gel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:SourceSignalQualityFirst.PNG|Noisy Signal&lt;br /&gt;
Image:MeasureElectrodeImpedanceSecond.PNG|Electrode impedance after rubbing the skin and applying more gel&lt;br /&gt;
Image:SourceSignalQualitySecond.PNG|Good Signal&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To switch back to recording mode,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;AcquisitionMode&#039;&#039; to analog signal acquisition.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;FilterEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;NotchEnabled&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*In the operator module, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To inspect current signal quality with filters,&lt;br /&gt;
*In the Source Signal module, right click.&lt;br /&gt;
**Set &#039;&#039;Notch&#039;&#039; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;60Hz&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grounding===&lt;br /&gt;
Brain signal quality can also be interfered by surrounded electronics. Unshield power adapters of monitors or running cables in the nearby walls can induce noise to the raw signal. While filtering can take care of most noise, physically removing the source of noise can achieve higher signal quality. One good way is to ground the subject though the amplifier. The gUSBamp of our example has a grounding outlet on the back. Subject can also inspect the effect of grounding by touching the metal case of the amplifier. Both can achieve a cleaner signal at the source level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==EEG Artifacts==&lt;br /&gt;
===Mains Interference===&lt;br /&gt;
Electrical power lines use sinusoidal voltages with a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz, depending on your&lt;br /&gt;
[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_countries_with_mains_power_plugs%2C_voltages_and_frequencies#Table_of_mains_voltages_and_frequencies country].&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, 50Hz are used in Europe, Asia, Africa, and parts of South America; 60Hz are used in North America, and parts of South America.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mains voltage is typically 110 or 230 Volts, and thus exceeds the EEG&#039;s 50 to 100 Microvolts by a factor of &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;2*10^6&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, or 126 dB. Therefore, mains interference is ubiquitous in EEG recordings, especially if taken outside specially equipped, shielded rooms, and EEG amplifiers usually provide a so-called notch filter that suppresses signals in a narrow band around the mains frequency in question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Amplifier notch filters are designed to suppress a certain amount of mains interference. When there is mains interference still visible in the signal after activating the amplifier&#039;s notch filter, this is often due to high electrode impedance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:MainsInterference.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Eye Blink Artifacts===&lt;br /&gt;
Eye blink artifacts are generated by fast movement of the eyelid along the cornea, as it happens during an eye blink.&lt;br /&gt;
By friction between lid and cornea, this movement results in charge separation, with a dominantly dipolar charge distribution, and the dipole moment pointing in up-down-direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the EEG, this is recorded as a positive peak lasting a few tenths of a second, mainly&lt;br /&gt;
visible in the frontopolar region, but propagating to all the electrodes of the montage, becoming weaker with distance from the front.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For blink artifacts, the power contained in their frequency components in the alpha band is negligible, so they produce no&lt;br /&gt;
apparent effect on SMR data analysis (as long as their number is reasonable).&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, their amplitude is quite large so that time domain analyses (such as&lt;br /&gt;
averaged P300 wave forms) can be strongly influenced by their presence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:BlinkArtifacts.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Eye Movement (EOG) Artifacts===&lt;br /&gt;
EOG artifacts are produced by eye movements, and generated by a frictive mechanism similar to the one underlying blink artifacts but involving retina and cornea rather than cornea alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect on frontopolar and frontotemporal electrodes can be symmetric or&lt;br /&gt;
antisymmetric, depending whether the movement is vertical or horizontal,&lt;br /&gt;
respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The effect of eye movement artifacts on frequency- or time-domain analysis is quite similar to that of blink artifacts, except that their frequency content is even lower, and amplitudes tend to be larger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EOGArtifacts.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Muscular (EMG) Artifacts===&lt;br /&gt;
EMG activity must be carefully checked at the beginning of each recording, and&lt;br /&gt;
verified throughout the recording. Its effect can completely obscure any&lt;br /&gt;
frequency analysis. Most common sources of EMG are the muscles that lift&lt;br /&gt;
the eye brows, and those which close the jaw. Both groups are inadvertently&lt;br /&gt;
contracted as a consequence of a psychological effort. Keeping the mouth&lt;br /&gt;
slightly open (or the tip of the toungue between the foreteeth) is a good&lt;br /&gt;
strategy to avoid jaw-generated EMG.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:EMGArtifacts.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Next Step==&lt;br /&gt;
*If you&#039;re following the [[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial|Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], please proceed to [[User Tutorial:Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session|Obtaining Mu Rhythm Parameters in an Initial Session]].&lt;br /&gt;
*If you&#039;re following the [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 BCI Tutorial]], please proceed to [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:Mu Rhythm BCI Tutorial]], [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8347</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8347"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T17:21:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box to compare the spelling results to example letters.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8346</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8346"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T17:18:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8345</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8345"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T17:17:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*then load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8344</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8344"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T17:09:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instructions to the Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*then load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|&#039;&#039;In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8343</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8343"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:57:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Instruction for Operator */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*then load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI. In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; flashes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:NumFlash.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:NumFlash.PNG&amp;diff=8342</id>
		<title>File:NumFlash.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=File:NumFlash.PNG&amp;diff=8342"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:55:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8341</id>
		<title>User Tutorial:Performing a P300 Spelling Session</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.bci2000.org/mediawiki/index.php?title=User_Tutorial:Performing_a_P300_Spelling_Session&amp;diff=8341"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:53:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Ckong: /* Preparation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This step assumes that you created a subject-specific configuration file for the on-line speller, as described in the [[User Tutorial:Obtaining P300 Parameters in a Calibration Session|previous step]] of this tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instruction for Operator==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;|When performing a P300 Spelling Session, start BCI2000 by running &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;batch/P3Speller_&amp;lt;Your_Amplifier&amp;gt;.bat&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;, &lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*then load one of the user-specific parameter files created previously from P300 Classifier.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:ClassiferParm.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;| To perform a copy spelling session -- one in which the subject has to spell a predefined text displayed on the screen --,&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039;, and load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_copy_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. Then, load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/fragments/amplifiers/&amp;lt;YourAmplifier&amp;gt;.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Check the &#039;&#039;DisplayResults&#039;&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to verify the accuracy of classifier. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:DisplayResult.PNG|center|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:VerifyClassifier.PNG|center|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|In our example, the classifier was generated successfully. With 15 flashes horizontally and vertically, the spelling result was accurate. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot; height=50px|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|As the subject gets confident with the &amp;quot;Copy Speller&amp;quot; mode, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Config&#039;&#039;&#039; and&#039;&#039;&#039;Load Parameters&#039;&#039;&#039; to load &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;parms/p3_tutorial/P300_free_speller.prm&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; from &#039;&#039;TargetDefinitions&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
**Add backspace into the spelling matrix.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:Backspace.PNG|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Now we will decrease the numbers of flashes to speed up spelling&lt;br /&gt;
Find the minimum numbers of flashes to yield correct predictions from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039; tab of P300 Classifier GUI. In our example, we choose &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Filtering&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;EpochsToAverage&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &#039;&#039;&#039;Application&#039;&#039;&#039; tab:&lt;br /&gt;
**Change the &#039;&#039;NumberOfSequences&#039;&#039; from &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;15&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;tt&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/tt&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Config&#039;&#039;&#039; to view the EEG signal, and [[User_Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup|prepare the subject for EEG recording]] according to the instructions below.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|When the subject are ready, click &#039;&#039;&#039;Start&#039;&#039;&#039; to perform &amp;quot;free spelling&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;|[[Image:FreeSpelling.PNG|center|500px]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Instructions to the Subject==&lt;br /&gt;
On the subject&#039;s screen, a speller matrix the subject is already familiar with from the initial session is presented.&lt;br /&gt;
Differently from that session, there is no text suggested; rather, the subject may choose freely which letters, words, and sentences to write.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You will see a speller matrix, containing letters, numbers, and punctuation marks.&lt;br /&gt;
*To choose a certain letter, concentrate on it by counting the number of flashes that occur for it.&lt;br /&gt;
*After some time, a result will be classified and appended to the text field located at the top of the window.&lt;br /&gt;
*If the letter that appeared is not what you intended, concentrate on the &amp;quot;backspace&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;undo&amp;quot; field to remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional instructions should be given regarding minimization of&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:EEG_Measurement_Setup#EEG Artifacts|artifacts]] from&lt;br /&gt;
*Contraction of the muscles of the face/head, swallowing;&lt;br /&gt;
*Eye blinks and eye movements;&lt;br /&gt;
*Motion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided that subjects are asked to minimize artifacts (e.g. asked to try to&lt;br /&gt;
swallow only during the pause between letters), he/she should be further&lt;br /&gt;
assisted in these efforts by providing a comfortable chair and a dimly lit room.&lt;br /&gt;
The&lt;br /&gt;
experimenter must carefully monitor the EEG and alert the subject in the case&lt;br /&gt;
he/she has forgotten some of the instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
When the experimenter is sure that his/her instructions have been well&lt;br /&gt;
understood, the recording session may start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Start&amp;quot; button to start the spelling experiment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Multiple Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
Once a run has ended, BCI2000 goes into suspended state.&lt;br /&gt;
Further runs will be added to the session when you click &#039;&#039;&#039;Resume&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When starting the next session, don&#039;t forget to increment the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter on the &#039;&#039;Storage&#039;&#039; tab. Otherwise, new runs will be added to the previous session&#039;s directory. Still, as a safety net, BCI2000 will never overwrite existing data files but increment the largest run number that exists in a session directory. Moreover, it documents date and time in the &#039;&#039;StorageTime&#039;&#039; parameter. This allows to later associate data files with multiple sessions by their time and date, even if the &#039;&#039;SessionNumber&#039;&#039; parameter has not been increased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Finished==&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the P300 speller tutorial is finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Congratulations! You are now able to perform [[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial|P300 spelling experiments]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Tutorial:P300 BCI Tutorial]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorial]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Ckong</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>